CHRYSLER
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under
license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
_LX_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
300
OWNER’S MANUAL
owners.mopar.ca
U. S. Canada
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
mopar.com/om
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab
, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................8
2
GE
TTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................78
4
SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 98
5
STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................150
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................207
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 236
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 279
9
MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................288
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ......................................................................................................319
11
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 323
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL.................................. 8
Essential Information .................................... 8
Symbols .......................................................... 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................. 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS........... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............10
KEYS ......................................................................11
Key Fob......................................................... 11
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16
Keyless Push Button Ignition ...................... 16
Vehicle On Message ...................................17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................18
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ...18
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped.. 19
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle................................................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 20
General Information .................................... 20
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................20
Key Programming ....................................... 21
Replacement Keys....................................... 21
General Information .................................... 21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .... 22
To Arm The System...................................... 22
To Disarm The System ................................ 22
Rearming Of The System............................. 23
Tamper Alert................................................. 23
DOORS .................................................................. 23
Manual Door Locks...................................... 23
Power Door Locks ....................................... 24
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................. 27
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 27
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .................................................. 28
SEATS ................................................................... 28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 29
Power Seats ................................................ 30
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped............. 31
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 33
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........ 35
HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................. 36
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats .. 36
Rear Head Restraints ................................. 37
Front Head Restraint Removal ................... 37
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 38
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................ 38
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................ 38
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 39
MIRRORS ..............................................................39
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ... 39
Outside Mirrors............................................ 40
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 40
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped ................ 40
Power Mirrors............................................... 40
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped................................................... 41
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 42
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ... 42
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 42
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................43
Multifunction Lever ..................................... 43
Headlight Switch.......................................... 43
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs).................. 43
High/Low Beam Switch............................... 43
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......... 43
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 44
Automatic Headlights ................................. 44
Parking Lights ............................................. 44
Headlights On With Wipers ......................... 45
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped ............................ 45
Headlight Time Delay ................................. 45
Lights-On Reminder .................................... 45
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................. 46
Turn Signals ................................................ 46
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 46
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................46
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 47
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............49
Wiper Operation...........................................49
Rain Sensing Wipers....................................50
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................52
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 52
Climate Control Functions...........................56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......57
Operating Tips ............................................. 57
WINDOWS ............................................................59
Power Window Controls............................... 59
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 60
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED............60
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 61
Closing Sunroof............................................ 61
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 62
Opening Power Shade .................................62
Closing Power Shade................................... 62
Venting Sunroof — Express ......................... 62
Pinch Protect Feature..................................62
Sunroof Maintenance..................................63
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 63
HOOD......................................................................63
To Open The Hood ...................................... 63
To Close The Hood....................................... 64
TRUNK ....................................................................64
Opening ........................................................ 64
Closing.......................................................... 65
Trunk Safety ................................................. 65
Cargo Area Features ................................... 65
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....... 67
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ........ 67
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 68
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 70
Using HomeLink®........................................ 70
Security......................................................... 71
Troubleshooting Tips ................................... 71
General Information .................................... 71
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 72
Storage ......................................................... 72
Cupholders .................................................. 73
Power Sunshade — If Equipped.................. 75
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 75
Sunglasses Bin Door .................................. 77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................................... 78
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................ 80
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 81
Location And Controls ................................. 81
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................. 82
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items .................................................. 83
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 86
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................87
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 88
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 91
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 94
Green Indicator Lights................................. 94
White Indicator Lights ................................. 95
Blue Indicator Lights ................................... 95
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......96
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................... 96
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................97
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...............................................98
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 98
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..... 99
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 105
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped.................................................105
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation - If Equipped ...........109
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 112
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 117
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...117
Important Safety Precautions...................117
Seat Belt Systems ....................................118
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...125
Child Restraints .........................................134
Transporting Pets ..................................... 146
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 147
Transporting Passengers ..........................147
Exhaust Gas ...............................................147
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................148
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................149
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................... 150
Automatic Transmission ...........................150
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................151
Normal Starting .........................................151
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................153
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................153
After Starting..............................................154
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 154
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS....... 154
PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 155
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 156
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................157
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................157
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......158
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 164
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 165
POWER STEERING .............................................165
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ....................166
To Activate..................................................166
To Set A Desired Speed ............................166
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................166
To Accelerate For Passing ........................167
To Resume Speed ....................................167
To Deactivate ............................................168
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................168
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation ... 169
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)....170
To Activate/Deactivate..............................170
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................171
To Cancel....................................................171
To Turn Off..................................................171
To Resume .................................................171
To Vary The ACC Speed .............................172
Setting The Following Distance In ACC.....173
Overtake Aid...............................................175
ACC Operation At Stop...............................175
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........175
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........176
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........177
General Information ..................................179
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode...........................................................180
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 182
ParkSense Sensors ...................................182
ParkSense Warning Display......................182
ParkSense Display.....................................182
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........187
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................187
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............188
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....188
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 189
LaneSense Operation................................189
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................190
LaneSense Warning Message.................. 190
Changing LaneSense Status.....................192
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 193
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 195
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........196
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 196
Vehicle Certification Label ........................196
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).......197
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ...........197
Overloading................................................197
Loading ......................................................197
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 198
Common Towing Definitions .....................198
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................200
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................200
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................201
Towing Requirements................................201
Towing Tips ................................................203
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) .................................................................... 204
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 205
Driving On Slippery Surfaces.....................205
Driving Through Water ..............................205
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...................... 207
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 207
General Information ..................................211
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 212
Replacement Bulbs ...................................212
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................214
FUSES.................................................................. 216
General Information ..................................216
Underhood Fuses.......................................216
Rear Interior Fuses ....................................220
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING........................ 224
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........224
Preparations For Jacking ..........................225
Jacking And Changing A Tire ....................225
Road Tire Installation ................................228
JUMP STARTING ................................................228
Preparations For Jump Start.....................229
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................229
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................231
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................231
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE..............................233
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................234
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ..................235
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models .............235
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................235
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................235
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................236
Maintenance Plan .....................................237
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................241
3.6L Engine ...............................................241
5.7L Engine ...............................................242
Checking Oil Level ....................................243
Adding Washer Fluid..................................243
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................243
Pressure Washing......................................244
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 244
Engine Oil ..................................................245
Engine Oil Filter..........................................246
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................246
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................247
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............248
Body Lubrication........................................249
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................249
Exhaust System .........................................251
Cooling System .........................................252
Brake System ............................................255
Automatic Transmission ...........................256
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .......257
Rear Axle ....................................................258
RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 258
TIRES................................................................... 258
Tire Safety Information .............................258
Tires — General Information ....................265
Tire Types ...................................................269
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................270
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................272
Tire Chains and Traction Devices.............273
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............273
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 274
Treadwear ..................................................274
Traction Grades .........................................274
Temperature Grades .................................274
VEHICLE STORAGE ............................................ 275
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
BODYWORK........................................................ 275
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......275
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........276
Preserving The Bodywork..........................276
INTERIORS ......................................................... 277
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................277
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................277
Leather Parts .............................................278
Glass Surfaces ..........................................278
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 279
Vehicle Identification Number ..................279
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 279
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 280
Torque Specifications................................280
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 281
3.6L Engine ................................................281
5.7L Engine ................................................281
Reformulated Gasoline ............................281
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................281
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................282
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................282
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...282
MMT In Gasoline........................................282
Fuel System Cautions................................283
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................283
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................284
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................285
Engine.........................................................285
Chassis .......................................................287
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................288
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...............................288
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................289
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................290
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings ................290
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .............307
Radio Operation.........................................307
Media Mode ...............................................307
AUX/USB CONTROL...........................................307
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....308
Regulatory And Safety Information...........308
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................................................... 309
Introducing Uconnect ................................309
Get Started.................................................309
Basic Voice Commands ............................310
Radio ..........................................................310
Media .........................................................311
Phone .........................................................312
Voice Text Reply.........................................312
Climate .......................................................313
Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................313
SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped ....................................................314
Register (4C/4C NAV)................................314
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) ..... 314
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)...........................315
SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV)...............315
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .................315
Do Not Disturb ..........................................316
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ..................316
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................317
General Information ..................................318
Additional Information...............................318
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
7
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 319
Prepare For The Appointment...................319
Prepare A List.............................................319
Be Reasonable With Requests .................319
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 319
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................320
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........320
In Mexico Contact ......................................320
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............320
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................320
Service Contract ........................................320
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................321
MOPAR PARTS ...................................................321
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................321
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................321
In Canada...................................................321
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .........................322
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle.
Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This
Owner's Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists
to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by
Warranty Information and customer-oriented
documents. Within this information, you will find
a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty
coverage, and the details of the terms and condi-
tions for maintaining its validity. Please take the
time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations,
tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of
this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated
to specific markets or versions are not expressly
indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only
consider the information which is related to the
trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout
the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be
applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that the
authorized dealers know your vehicle best,
have factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you
desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's
Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
INTRODUCTION 9
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display the message “Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for play-
back. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in
real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found by the RKE
system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 feet (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, key fob commands are
disabled if the vehicle is at or above 2 mph
(4 km/h).
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove compart-
ment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
1 — Trunk Open
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Button
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical release button on the back of the
key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal Process
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
In a situation of a low or fully depleted battery, a
backup method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the emergency key) against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will also be activated.
NOTE:
All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Unlock the driver door on the first push of the
key fob unlock button.
Unlock all doors on the first push of the key
fob unlock button.
NOTE:
To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry,
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will
turn on. Refer to “Interior Lights” in this chapter
for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the
first push of the unlock button on the key fob.
To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
1 — Mechanical Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to
flash when the doors are locked with the key fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to
90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
the key fob. The time for this feature is program-
mable, on vehicles equipped, through Uconnect
Settings. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal if programmed.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further programmable information.
NOTE:
To lock the doors with passive entry, Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Doors”
in this chapter for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
doors are locked with the key fob. This feature
can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push
the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic
Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
button a second time or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the
exterior lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m)
from the vehicle when using the key fob to
turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio
frequency noises emitted by the system.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screw-
driver, or a coin and gently pry the two
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
NOTE:
Separating the case can also be done with a key
blade or a flat head screwdriver.
Separating Case With A Key Blade
Separating Case With A Flat Blade Screwdriver
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar surface, and then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery,
match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+)
sign on the inside of the battery clip, located
on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers because skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the igni-
tion with the push of a button as long as the key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four oper-
ating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth posi-
tion is START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
(Continued)
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN (engine not running) position,
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On
message will display in the cluster (if equipped).
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active for three minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. Pushing
the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and push the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started using the START/
STOP ignition button after two consecutive
timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction indicator is not illuminated
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times with the key fob. However, the ignition
must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP
ignition button twice (or the ignition switch
must be placed in the ON/RUN position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for
a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key
and Turn To Run” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you insert the key.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the
following occur:
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds
2500 rpm.
Any engine warning lights come on.
Low Fuel Light turns on.
The hood is opened.
The hazard switch is pushed.
The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
The brake pedal is pushed.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through
the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
fore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob
obtained from another vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In addi-
tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb
check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the
event that a valid key fob is used to start the
engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec-
tronics, the engine will start and shut off after
two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless
push button ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the vehicle security alarm is armed, inte-
rior switches for door locks and trunk release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm,
the vehicle security alarm will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Refer to "Ignition Switch" in
this chapter for further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry," in “Doors” in this chapter
for further information).
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds
between cycles, up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active and the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three
times when you disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on
each door trim panel downward. To unlock the
front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the
door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the
door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure
the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock your vehicle.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
this section for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing the igni-
tion in the OFF position or closing the door will
allow the locks to operate. If the driver door is
open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to
remove the key fob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and arm the security alarm
(if equipped).
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically. The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. For further informa-
tion regarding selecting “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed, regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry
vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car and it does not find any Passive
Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
The doors are locked manually using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the
right side of the Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL), which is located on the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch,
unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock all four doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the trans-
mission is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite
rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when
the Child-Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to
the unlocked position, open the window, and
open the door using the outside door handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area. To fold the
rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the
upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded
forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright posi-
tion, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured
in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the
switches are located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use these switches to move
the driver’s seat up, down, forward, rearward or
to recline the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rear-
ward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control (If Equipped)
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase
or decrease the lumbar support. Push the
switch upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
contains desired position settings for the driver
seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your key fob can
also be programmed to recall the same posi-
tions when the unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and
the other key fob can be linked to memory posi-
tion 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Memory Seat Switches
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
either of the memory buttons (1) or (2).
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this
section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in
this section for instructions on how to set a
memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the memory switch, push memory
button (1) on the memory switch.
To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position 1.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
To recall the memory setting for driver two
using the memory switch, push memory
button (2) on the memory switch.
To recall the memory settings for driver two
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches. When
a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associ-
ated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later
disabled) through the programmable features
in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia”.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one
for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of indicator lights changes
from two to one, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine perfo-
rations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHR will auto-
matically extend forward minimizing the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and
the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHR do not return to their normal position, see
an authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint and push downward on the
head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable
positions: up or down. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint should be in
the raised position. When there are no occu-
pants in the center seat, the head restraint can
be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint and push downward on the
head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see an authorized dealer.
The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes. Then,
adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of
a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position,
push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The power tilt/telescoping steering column
switch is located below the multifunction lever
on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up
or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the switch toward you or
push the switch away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry key fob
or the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in “Seats” in this chapter.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time will vary based on envi-
ronmental temperatures. The heated steering
wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
and a slight overlap of the view obtained from
the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-
cially of the lane next to your vehicle.
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn
signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs,
which are located in the upper outer corner of
each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal
lights in the front and rear of the vehicle.
Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when
you use the remote keyless entry key fob or
open any door. This LED shines outward to illu-
minate the front and rear door handles. It also
shines downward to illuminate the area in front
of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after
about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immedi-
ately once the ignition is placed into the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the
L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror
that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the select button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be
adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Seats” in this chapter for further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can
be electrically folded rearward and unfolded
into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a
second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the drive position. If
the mirror does not electrically fold, check for
ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (with the ignition OFF, all
doors closed, and the doors are locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is
not turned on when delivered from the factory.
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in "Multi-
media" for further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have
an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
downward and swing the mirror cover upward.
The light turns on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun
visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing
the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window,
grab the sun visor and pull rearwards until the
sun visor is in the desired position. To use the
extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor
and pull rearward.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on
the left side of the instrument panel.
This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking
light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second
detent for headlight, parking light and instru-
ment panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on
when the engine starts, headlights are off, and
the parking brake is off. The headlights must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
If allowed, by law, in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the DRLs can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in "Multimedia" for further
information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted to the wind-
shield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield is replaced, the camera must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate
the system (normal operation of low
beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to
reactivate the system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be deacti-
vated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever
is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, rotate the headlight switch coun-
terclockwise to the AUTO position. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for
up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into
the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch to the first
detent to turn the parking lights on. This
also turns on all instrument panel lighting.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on after the wipers are turned on if the
headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position
and the programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the
wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE:
The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is
steering.
NOTE:
Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by
performing a brief sequence of rotations.
The Adaptive Headlight System is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illu-
mination for up to 90 seconds (programmable)
when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds.
The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable
using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sound to alert the driver when the
driver's door is opened.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is
opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically ten minutes after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if
the interior lights were switched on manually or
are on because a door is open. The Battery
Protection also includes the glove compartment
light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is
enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position, or cycle the light switch.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in
the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time. The lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the
key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts illumina-
tion for improved visibility of the floor and
center console area.
Ambient Light
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the bright-
ness of the door handle lights, map pocket
lights, and ambient light located in the over-
head console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight
switch and is located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the left dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights, radio,
and lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
completely upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior lights will
remain on when the instrument panel dimmer
control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to
the extreme bottom (O) off position. The interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature
brightens all text displays such as the odom-
eter, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunc-
tion lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent, past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the second
detent past the intermittent settings for
high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the first detent position, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired
delay interval. There are four delay settings, which
allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles when
the vehicle speed is over 10 mph (16 km/h). The
delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the
wiper control is left in any position other
than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the wind-
shield wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and hold it
for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing
the lever and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position to activate a single wipe cycle to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until
you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful for
road splash or over spray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is
the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for
normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. The rain sensing wipers will automati-
cally change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place
the wiper switch in the OFF position when not
using the system.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision.
You might not see other vehicles or other
obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the
windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and
during windshield washer use.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper speed is in the low or high
position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective
features for the wiper blades and arms. It will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle is stationary and the outside
temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is
moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h) or the outside tempera-
ture rises above freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, the auto-
matic transmission gear selector is in the
NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper
control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Automatic Climate Controls
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control section.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically
adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release
this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when
AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator illuminates when Sync is on.
Sync synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger
temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Icon Description
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condi-
tioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-
ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Icon Description
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to change the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
, on, and blower on
high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
on and set the mode
control to the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
and turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
the position. If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to the position.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect system,
the power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time is programmable.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and, in some models, passenger
power window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch to the first detent and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
If Equipped
Pull window up switch to second detent for at
least a half of a second and the window will go
up automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up opera-
tion, push or pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the
window switch briefly and release it when you
want the window to stop.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window switch again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the Auto-Reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
and hold the switch to close the window
manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors and the
rear sunscreen (if equipped). To disable the
window controls and the rear sunscreen, push
and release the window lockout button (setting
it in the down position). To enable the window
controls and the rear sunscreen, push and
release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the up position).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
(Continued)
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open auto-
matically to the open position. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open opera-
tion, any movement of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at
the open position. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade
will remain in a partially opened condition until
the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close auto-
matically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any other actuation of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the sunroof switch is pushed again.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Opening Power Shade
Express Mode
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will auto-
matically open to the halfway position and stop
automatically. Push the switch a second time
from the halfway position and the shade will
automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop auto-
matically at the half-open position. Push and
hold the shade switch rearward again and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close auto-
matically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close
button again will automatically close both the
sunroof and shade completely.
Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement and the shade will
remain in a partially closed condition until the
switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will auto-
matically cycle to the halfway open position prior
to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
The power sunroof switch can remain active
in Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
front edge of the hood, and push the safety
catch to the left to release it, before raising
the hood.
Hood Safety Latch
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Close The Hood
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
TRUNK
Opening
The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle
using the power trunk button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
The trunk lid can be opened from outside the
vehicle by pushing the trunk button on the key
fob twice within five seconds or by using the
trunk passive entry button located on the under-
side of the decklid overhang. The release
feature will function only when the vehicle is
unlocked or a valid Passive Entry key fob is
within 5 ft (1.5m) of the trunk.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
trunk open symbol will display in the instrument
cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The
odometer display will reappear once the trunk is
closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is
closed.
NOTE:
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
”Doors” in this chapter for further information
on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
Opening From Inside The Vehicle
Interior Power Trunk Release
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release
button located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Opening From Outside The Vehicle
To Unlock/Open The Trunk
The trunk may be unlocked/opened using
either of the following methods:
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Passive Entry Button
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to
open the trunk.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Passive Entry Button
The trunk passive entry button is located on the
back of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry
key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the
passive entry button to open the trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
Closing
With one or more hands placed on the outside
trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you
hear the trunk lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key
fob isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will
latch then automatically unlock if the key fob is
sensed, not allowing the key fob to be locked in
the trunk area.
Trunk Safety
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emer-
gency release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being
locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened
by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle
attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides
cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold
down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the
seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are
folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright posi-
tion, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is
unattended. Once in the trunk, young children
may not be able to escape, even if they
entered through the rear seat. If trapped in
the trunk, children can die from suffocation
or heat stroke.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo
area. The trunk mat is used to protect the inte-
rior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery
bag hooks, located on either side of the rear
cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children at any time. They
could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit
50 lbs (22 kg) of the grocery bag hook.
Damage may occur to hook and mounting
surface.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a
cargo net to keep items secure while driving.
Rear Cargo Net
Attachment
To attach the cargo net the clips must be
hooked through the loops on both sides of the
cargo area.
Cargo Net Attachments
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide
a level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approxi-
mately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed
itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset
the system.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the
overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, desig-
nate the three different HomeLink® channels.
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the
center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
1 — Top Attachment
2 — Bottom Attachment
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal
it is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These garage
door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the Home-
Link® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the garage door
opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
On some garage door openers/devices there
may be a light that blinks when the garage
door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN
mode.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device acti-
vates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to flash
after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers manu-
factured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the Home-
Link® indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the Home-
Link® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door lock,
home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used at any time.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indi-
cator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming Home-
Link®, here are some of the most common solu-
tions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic Devel-
opment Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
Cubby Bin
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector. The cubby bin is covered with a push-push
actuated door. Push inward on the door to open it;
push the door a second time to close it.
Cubby Bin
Console Features
Two separate storage compartments are
located underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a
removable upper storage tray that can be slid
forward/rearward on rails for access to the
lower storage area. This tray has an integrated
coin holder, along with additional area for small
items and handheld devices. Below the upper
tray, the lower storage compartment is made for
larger items. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB, and AUX jack are located here.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Upper Storage Tray
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers, there is a storage bin
located in the armrest. Lift upward on the latch
to open the storage compartment.
Rear Armrest Storage
Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge
of the center console.
Retractable Cover
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in
the center armrest between the rear seats.
The cupholders are positioned forward in the
armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient
access to beverage cans or bottles while main-
taining a resting place for the rear occupant’s
elbows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the front cupholders are
equipped with a light ring that illuminates the
cupholders for the front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for
the rear passengers. The light ring is controlled
by the Dimmer Control. Refer to “Interior Lights”
in this chapter for further information.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and
cooled cupholders. The cupholders are
designed to help keep warm beverages warm
and cool beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the
cupholder. Push the symbol a second time to
turn the cupholder off. Push the “Hot” symbol
once to activate the cupholder. Push the symbol
a second time to turn off the cupholder.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power
sunshade that will reduce the amount of
sunlight that will shine through the rear wind-
shield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the
Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button and then press the
“Rear Sunshade” button to raise the power
sunscreen. Press the “Rear Sunshade” button a
second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the
vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will
automatically fully lower. When the transmis-
sion is shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will
automatically return to the fully raised position
after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by
passengers in the rear seats. The power
sunshade switch is located on the back of the
center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the
sunshade. Push the switch a second time to
lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
NOTE:
The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window
controls from the driver switch window lockout
switch.
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt
(13 Amp) power outlet on the instrument panel
and one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in the
center console that can be used to power
cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled
with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot”
position, avoid contact with the heated
portion of the cupholder in order to reduce
the possibility of burns. Persons who are
unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise particular care in order to prevent
serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free
of debris or stray objects when operated in
the “Hot” position.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the instru-
ment panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area
of the center console.
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media
Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to
120 Watts (10 Amps). If the power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
NOTE:
The instrument panel power outlet and dual
rear console USB ports can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by moving the
#12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. Refer to
“Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin
located on the center console on vehicles not
equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire
leading to bodily injury could result.
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console
Power Outlet / Media Hub
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/
push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door
to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Engine
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Instrument Cluster For 5.7L Engine
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this section for further
information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
For further information refer to “Refueling
The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating.”
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
NOTE:
The warning / indicator Lights will briefly illumi-
nate for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn
the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instru-
ment cluster display can show you how systems
are working and give you warnings when they
are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific infor-
mation you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features an inter-
active display which is located in the instrument
cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pushing
the arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow buttons allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options
presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the up and
down arrows will allow the user to select
the item of interest.
Pushing the OK button makes the selection.
A confirmation screen will appear, returning
the user to the first page of the submenu.
Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Information is reset by pushing and holding
the OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If condi-
tions are not met a popup message of "To
reset oil life engine must be off with ignition
in run" will be displayed (for five seconds),
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system
did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired Selectable Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as
desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the OK button to toggle
between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following
submenu (pushing the left or right arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the
submenu):
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
AWD Status — If Equipped
Driver Assist
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and
visuals about the Adaptive Cruise Control and
LaneSense features. When they are both off the
screen, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The infor-
mation displayed depends on LaneSense
system status. Push the LaneSense button
(located on the center stack below the
Uconnect display) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
LaneSense Off
When LaneSense is deactivated, the display
will read “LaneSense Off.”
LaneSense On
When LaneSense is activated, the display will
read “LaneSense On.”
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
The Fuel Economy Menu has two submenu
pages; one with Current Value (instantaneous
calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and
one without the Current Value displayed (toggle
the left or right arrow button to select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an
amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy
improves.
Hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy information.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the
currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages, if any. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
NOTE:
Screen Setup is available only when the vehicle
is not in motion.
1. Upper Left
Compass (default)
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
2. Upper Right
Compass
Outside Temp (default)
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Center
Menu Title (default)
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Information
Digital Speed
None
4. Current Gear
On
Off (default)
5. Odometer
Show (default)
Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
Standard (default)
Detailed
7. Restore Default
OK
Cancel
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional moni-
toring of the electrical system and status of the
vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this section for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and inte-
rior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-
ping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be consid-
ered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active warning lights will display first if appli-
cable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some warning lights are
optional and may not appear.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir,
it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an over-
heated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon
as possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing.
If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmis-
sion in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This warning
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is acti-
vated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
cations corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure warning light when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure warning light illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure warning light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure warning light. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning light will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction warning light after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 1.9 gal (7.13 L), this light will
turn on and a single chime will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, have the brake system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Colli-
sion Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will turn on to indicate
the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
functioning properly and that service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to
drift out of its lane unintentionally
without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from
solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not oper-
ating and requires service. Please see
an authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped” in “Safety”
for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
Refer to “Eco Mode — If Equipped” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting
for the ACC system when the system
is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to
provide visual and torque warnings if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned
on, but is not set. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense indi-
cator light illuminates solid white. This
occurs when only left, right, or neither
lane line has been detected. If a single lane line
is detected, the system is ready to provide only
visual warnings if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam head-
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diag-
nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-
sions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a dead
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should have
your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M
station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
SAFETY 99
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Elec-
tronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Miti-
gation (ERM). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support
(RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake applica-
tion and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by moni-
toring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs,
especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
(Continued)
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited
slip feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed
may be required to return to ESC On.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track"
are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illu-
minate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display
in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Acti-
vation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is turned on.
Each time the ignition is turned on, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake pres-
sure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
Driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer.
HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then
back to ON. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is
disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure to
remove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an emer-
gency braking situation may occur by moni-
toring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light randomly
alerting on the trailer or even remaining illu-
minated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume if the corre-
sponding turn signal is activated. Refer to
“Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-
sary. The BSM system will issue an alert during
these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occa-
sionally the system may alert on such objects.
This is normal operation and your vehicle does
not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP) - If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are avail-
able in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing
up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation - If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instru-
ment cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a poten-
tial frontal collision. The warnings and limited
braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors, as well as the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system, to calculate the
probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide a
brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take
action based upon these progressive warnings,
then the system will provide a limited level of
active braking to help slow the vehicle and miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the
system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force
as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below
20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Colli-
sion Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is
located in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety
And Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can
be checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
system state is kept in memory from one igni-
tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings
are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting
and the Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away and it applies limited braking.
This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front of you when you
are much closer. This setting provides less reac-
tion time than the “Far” setting, which allows for
a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away, oncoming
traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW disables in the same manner as ACC,
and will display a screen indicating that the
feature is unavailable when it has been
disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momen-
tarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer
present, the system will return to its full perfor-
mance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on
the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pres-
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard pres-
sure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
(Continued)
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pres-
sure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situa-
tion, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main-
tenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to
XX” message and a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster will display a "Service
Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists.
If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
"Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and
an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a “Service Tire Pres-
sure System” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pres-
sure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to mini-
mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact infor-
mation.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
(Continued)
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt.
To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage
is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt
anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-
rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt
Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a
fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether deployment in a particular roll-
over event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of
their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and
one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage
to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard posi-
tion. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit.
If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” descrip-
tion in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while
you push the child restraint rearward and down-
ward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available. Refer to “Locating
The Upper Tether Anchorages” in this section
for details on the location of the tether
anchorages.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise
the head restraint, and where possible, route
the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Center Tether Attachment
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback
and head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located in the panel between the rear seat-
back and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger
during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating
or cooling controls to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni-
tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light
is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with
the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK position
before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the igni-
tion switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
will AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further
details.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situa-
tions on the following pages occur. It is a
backup system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and
an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC Mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
(Continued)
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and
an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instru-
ment cluster display and near the gear selector.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-
tures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from an autho-
rized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Cold Weather
Operation" procedure, and has not experienced
an extended park condition as identified in
"Extended Park Starting" procedure it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC elec-
trical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-
sion cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has
a removable cap that is located near the air box.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
(Continued)
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-
tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the
park brake pedal fully. To release the parking
brake, press the park brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illu-
minate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadver-
tently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary elec-
tronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S)
is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or
S position, push down on the gear selector and
then rotate it. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate
the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-
tion, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle
is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW
shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed.
Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector
provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE,
and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control (shift
paddles mounted on the steering wheel).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3,
etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the transmis-
sion into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoS-
tick shift control (if equipped, refer to “AutoStick” in
this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmis-
sion temperature as well as vehicle speed.
Normal operation will resume once the trans-
mission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of avail-
able engine power.
To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear
selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or push the
SPORT button in the center stack.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased
engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electroni-
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-
vated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at
all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions,
and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mode, it will operate automatically, shifting
between the eight available gears. To engage
AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The
transmission will revert back to normal opera-
tion after a period of time, depending on accel-
erator pedal activity. When the transmission
gear selector is in the SPORT position, tapping
either shift paddle will activate "permanent"
AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in
AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately
disables AutoStick (as described below).
Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while using
(+) to enter AutoStick will retain the current
gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Paddle Shifters
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode,
the transmission will automatically shift up
when maximum engine speed is reached. If
the accelerator is fully depressed, the trans-
mission will downshift when possible (based
on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of
accelerator pedal activity will cause the trans-
mission to revert to automatic operation.
If AutoStick is engaged while the transmis-
sion gear selector is in the SPORT position,
manual gear selection will be maintained
until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or
as described below. The transmission will not
upshift automatically at redline in this mode,
nor will downshifts be obtained if the acceler-
ator pedal is pressed to the floor.
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmis-
sion will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle depressed will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear
possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold
the (+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out
of SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick.
You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
If your vehicle is equipped with SPORT mode,
this mode is a configuration set up for typical
enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission
and steering systems are all set to their SPORT
settings. SPORT Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode
may be activated and deactivated by pushing
the SPORT button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy
by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylin-
ders during light load and cruise conditions.
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the elec-
tric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” within
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light is displayed and the “POWER STEERING
SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the Electric
Power Steering Fault Warning Light and
message turn off.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control system takes
over accelerator operations at speeds greater
than 25 mph (40 km/h), or 20 mph (32 km/h)
depending on engine size and axle ratio.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed
Control is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will
appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate
the Speed Control is off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the acceler-
ator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will
appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accelerate
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decelerate
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the igni-
tion in the OFF position, erases the set speed
from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major road-
ways. However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control
function performs differently. Please refer to
the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes func-
tion differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning system.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accelerate
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decelerate
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the system will cancel and
the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver
will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle
at a standstill.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) button, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following a target vehicle.
When you have ACC active and follow a target
vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds you
will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete
stop while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for two seconds in the stop posi-
tion. If the target vehicle does not start
moving within two seconds, the ACC system
will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must
be applied manually. An audible chime will
sound when the brakes are released.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
In addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instru-
ment cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-
mation on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal (Lane Change Assist feature included)
and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side. Switching lanes will not impact the
ACC system if the driver is already traveling at
the set speed.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a stand-
still while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will
resume motion without the need for any driver
action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-
still, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and
the brakes will release. A cancel message will
display on the instrument cluster display and
produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the
following appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will
read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or
failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions tempo-
rarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on wind-
shield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited func-
tionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try acti-
vating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system func-
tionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-
ness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are trav-
eling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may
not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the
ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect
a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to
maintain a set cruising speed without requiring
the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed
is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the
memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). Refer
to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in
this section for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the hori-
zontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
While the vehicle is in REVERSE, the ParkSense
Display is shown in the instrument cluster.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
REAR WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense
Warning screen will be displayed when an
obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front
region, the display will show a single arc in the
center front region. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound
tone will be produced when reaching the
second flashing arc and will change to a contin-
uous sound tone when the first flashing arc
appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle
and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
FRONT WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately
three seconds when an obstacle has been
detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Customer-Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime
volume settings will not be accessible from the
instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled,
the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Park-
Sense is disabled or requires service. The Park-
Sense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARK-
SENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" pop up message for five seconds.
After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will inter-
rupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
object is detected within the five second pop-up
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning
will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides
an audible warning to the driver when the
driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED
in the LaneSense button will be illuminated
when the system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push
the LaneSense button (LED turns off).
A “LaneSense On” message is shown in
the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state, on or off, from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid
yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lines/Solid Yellow Telltale)
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be config-
ured through the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense
settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect touchscreen
display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen,
you can configure the intensity of the torque
warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/
medium/late) through the personalization
settings.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages. (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touch-
screen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
However, this feature is canceled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or by
pressing the image defeat “X” button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the last touchscreen
appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. The active guide
lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
When manually activated, a counter will be initi-
ated after the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h). The rear view camera image will turn
off when this counter reaches 10 seconds. The
counter will be reset when the vehicle speed is
8 mph (13 km/h) or below.
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the rear view camera image will
continue to be displayed until the transmission
is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the image defeat
“X” button is pressed.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when
backing up, especially in sunny weather
conditions, since there may be a glare from
the sun at certain angles that can make the
image on the touchscreen difficult to see.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located in the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for five seconds to
allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow
for emergency refueling with a gas can.
Fuel Funnel
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release located in
the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in
case of an emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the
left side inner trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable.
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This
information should be used for passenger and
luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not
exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial
scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side.
Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible.
Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load
is within the specified GVWR, you must redis-
tribute the weight. Improper weight distribution
can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label”
affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle's
proper tire pressure.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it
is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and infor-
mation on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow
your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and recom-
mendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Loading” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables, and equip-
ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multi-
plied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies indi-
vidual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a fric-
tion/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contrib-
utes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced
on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
(Continued)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on
the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle.
Also, additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi-
cult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Sched-
uled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The trans-
mission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped)
to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this
vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
known as hydroplaning and may cause partial
or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited
Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does
not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a
given axle for improved handling.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
207
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS oper-
ator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
(Continued)
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle infor-
mation and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active.
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Sidemarker Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Sidemarker Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and
the ignition turned to the OFF position. Because
of this, you should not attempt to service a
headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Bi - Halogen Low Beam And High Beam
Headlamp — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to
access the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counter-
clockwise, and then pull it out of the head-
lamp assembly.
Headlamp Bulb Location
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring
assembly and install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into
the headlamp assembly, and then turn it
clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
serious electrical shock or electrocution if not
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
for service.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to
access the turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
Turn Signal Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
Turn Signal Bulb Location
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
socket and pull straight out from the lamp
assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring
connector and install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly
straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the head-
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are
not serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must
be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use
LED sources that are not serviceable sepa-
rately. The Rear Lamps must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer for further
information.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is
not serviceable separately. The License Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are
not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located
in the engine compartment. This module
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location
and descriptions are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/ functional fuse
element.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/ not functional fuse
element (blown fuse).
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
–
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22
40 Amp Green /
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger / Charger Police)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module (300 if equipped)
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch / EPS – If Equipped / Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located
in the trunk under the spare tire access panel.
This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse
cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center
cover.
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
12 – 20 Amp Yellow
Dual USB Center Console Rear/+12 Volt Power Outlet IP – If Equipped /
IP APO – If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT)
22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door – If Equipped/Diagnostic Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
26 – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger Non - Police/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue
Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – If
Equipped / Remote Start – If Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT – If Equipped)
41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT – If Equipped)
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43 –
20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped / Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane Departure
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated/Cooled Cup Holders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RearView Mirror / Police Run
Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade – If Equipped
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps
to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Cover
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly
from under the spare tire. Turn the jack
screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug
nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for additional
warnings, cautions, and information about
the spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions”. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure
the base of the jack faces the front of the
vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifica-
tions” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
(Continued)
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on
the right side of the engine compartment for
jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and cycle
the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver's seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access
the Manual Park Release lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Engaging The Lever
6. While holding the locking tab in the disen-
gaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever up and rearward, until
it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
moved. Release the parking brake only
when the vehicle is securely connected to a
tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on
the rear side) rearward (away from the
lever) to unlatch the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward and down, to its original position,
until the locking tab snaps into place to
secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed posi-
tion.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-
sure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the "ESC OFF" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC OFF"
switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park
Release" in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same
limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
The manufacturer does not recommend
towing this vehicle using a tow dolly.
Vehicle damage may occur.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
AWD models can also be towed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) (not in PARK!), and the rear
wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in
the ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the
key fob is unavailable.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground)
under the following conditions:
The automatic transmission must be in
NEUTRAL (N). Refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when
the engine is off.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only acceptable method of towing is
with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indi-
cator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for the vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Oper-
ating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
or is operated predominantly at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your
next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid
(All Wheel Drive Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All
Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every month. The best time to check the engine
oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located
in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure
to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
(not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply
some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon
(4 liters) of washer fluid when the message
“Low Washer Fluid” appears in the instrument
cluster.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add
water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose
that should not be disconnected and
should only be replaced with a battery of
the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in this section for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) —
3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
NOTE:
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent may be used
when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395
is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) —
5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in
improper operation of the Fuel Saver Tech-
nology. Refer to “Fuel Saver Technology – If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air condi-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environ-
mental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly
substance with a low global-warming potential.
The manufacturer recommends that air condi-
tioning service be performed by an authorized
dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under
the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl
on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the
windshield wipers. When installing a new filter,
ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen
by pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access
cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in
the direction of airflow, which is toward the
rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the
filter will indicate this).
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-
shield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
4. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
(Continued)
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the arm until
motion stops, then fold down the locking
tab to secure.
NOTE:
The locking tab will not snap into place until the
blade is properly positioned on the wiper arm
hook.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the cata-
lytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips”
in “Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system,
if the exhaust system is replaced with after-
market products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) will illuminate.
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an autho-
rized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight-
ness of the connection at the bottle and radi-
ator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your commu-
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in
this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
immediately if the brake system warning light
indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up
to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because
it may cause leaking in the system.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recom-
mended by the manufacturer, and has been
kept in a tightly closed container to avoid
contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to main-
tain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further infor-
mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the trans-
mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is
an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers
as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immedi-
ately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a
transfer case and front differential. The exterior
surface of these components should be
inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is
located in the middle of the rear housing. To
inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the
fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even
with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add
fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the
outer cover near the halfshaft attachment.
To inspect the differential fluid level, remove
the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with
or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Tire Terminology And Definitions
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard. The combined weight of occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-
cable) should never exceed the weight referenced
here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire pres-
sure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the orig-
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-
rary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall
on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces
are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are recom-
mended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on rear tires only.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models: For a P215/
65R17 and P225/60R18 use of Peerless
Chain Super Z6 low profile traction device or
equivalent is recommended.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models: For a P235/
55R19 tire, use of an S Class traction device
or equivalent is recommended.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts
of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some direc-
tional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade rating
assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor trac-
tion performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days, you may want to take these steps
to protect your battery.
NOTE:
SRT (if equipped), storage between 21-60 days
can use Storage Mode rather than discon-
necting the battery. Storage Mode can be found
in the instrument cluster display under vehicle
info/battery page.
Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish.
Take care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total
Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.
Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use
high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners.
If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Appli-
cation of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 278
279
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on
the left front corner of the instrument panel.
The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also
appears on the Automobile Information Disclo-
sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration, and the title.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some loss
of overall braking effectiveness. This may be
evident by increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(for example, repeated brake applications with
the engine OFF), the brakes will still function.
The effort required to brake the vehicle will be
much greater than that required with the power
system operating.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 279
280 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 280
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 281
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will
not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-
mended. Properly blended reformulated gaso-
line will provide improved performance and
durability of engine and fuel system compo-
nents.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recom-
mended. Using gasolines that have these addi-
tives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 281
282 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG
or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 282
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 283
(Continued)
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 283
284 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol. 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol.
18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 285
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, Up to 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 285
286 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 286
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 287
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to
use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 287
288
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diag-
nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instru-
ment panel. These buttons allow you to access
and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete, press the X button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights ON + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10)
with the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the instrument cluster display, and
navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:
Set Theme List Of Options
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touch-
screen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or
km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to “Far”, or set
to “Near”. The default status of FCW Sensitivity is the “Far” setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the “Near” setting.
This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection,
press the Forward Collision Warning Active Braking button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only” or
“Sound & Display”. To change the ParkSense status, press and release the Sound Only or Sound & Display option.
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
NOTE:
The Front ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
The factory default volume setting is Medium. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Power Steering Default — If
Equipped
Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When the “Electronic Power Steering Default” is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to either “Normal”, “Sport”, or
“Comfort”.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well
as sound an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not oper-
ating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the previously viewed screen appears
again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up
to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK”
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup
camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirror In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted
out of REVERSE.
Headlights With Wipers On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the wind-
shield.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Steering Directed Lights On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob, or when
using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock
button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle
is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use key fob).
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio
station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Dr Heat/Vent Seat &
Steering Wheel
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver’s vented seat will turn on.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 mins 10 mins
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), dual-pane power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose
from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay
0 30
60 90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting
the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the + or – button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker Icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap
the Speaker icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touch-
screen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off,
1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button on the touch-
screen, select On or Off.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
-3 +3
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selec-
tion, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows an media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection, press the On or Off buttons
to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default)
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones And Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Sources” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-
mation, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection — If Equipped
On Off
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you
would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings
button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
Restore App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Apps OK Cancel
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the
Clear Personal Data button and a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?”
Modem Reset — If Equipped OK Cancel
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after
the current track begins to play.
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the
left rocker switch is nonfunctional.
AUX/USB CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
AUX/USB Ports
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
Located on the rear of the front center console
are dual USB “Charge Only” ports.
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condi-
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wire-
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further
from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-
usXM® Satellite Radio trial required).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media,
Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-
tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say “Help.” The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Blue-
tooth® and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song and genre information is
displayed.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system
is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “Call”, then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work”.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further infor-
mation on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures
hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is
equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop”.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Navigation
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required
to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services in the next section of this guide. To
register with SiriusXM Guardian™, press the Apps
button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen
to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the conti-
nental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a Siri-
usXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent who
will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
US residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/
guardian.
Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if you
are registered for SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts
when it detects issues with its key systems that
need your attention. For further information,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and sending a destination from your
phone to your vehicle.
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock,
Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
3. Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go (if equipped).
4. Press the Settings side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit DriveUcon-
nect.com (US Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie list-
ings, check a sports score or the 5-day weather
forecast? SiriusXM® Travel Link is a suite of
services that brings a wealth of information
right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“Show fuel prices”
“Show 5-day weather forecast”
“Show extended weather”
TIP:
Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice
Command.
SiriusXM® Travel Link
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Siri® Eyes Free Available
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
the Microphone icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Android Auto™ On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone
to project your iPhone® and many of its apps
onto your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s
data plan will be used for certain apps). Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media
USB ports, using the Apple® factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new Apple
CarPlay® icon that replaces your Phone icon on
the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button
within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use
certain iPhone’s® features such as:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps (if equipped)
Additional Apps (if equipped)
Apple CarPlay® On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com
or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 318
319
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 319
320 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 320
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 321
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html for further infor-
mation.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized dealer or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety defect to
the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 321
322 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles.
A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix prob-
lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com
To order a hard copy of your Owner's Informa-
tion, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 322
323
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .................................279
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) .....................................168
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............253
Adding Fuel ..........................................195
Adding Washing Fluid .............................243
Additives, Fuel ......................................281
Adjust
Forward
.............................................30
Rearward ...........................................30
Air Bag ................................................126
Advance Front Air Bag .........................126
Air Bag Operation ...............................127
Air Bag Warning Light ..........................125
Driver Knee Air Bag ............................128
Enhanced Accident Response .......132, 235
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...................235
Front Air Bag .....................................126
If Deployment Occurs ..........................131
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................128
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............132
Maintenance .....................................132
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........126
Side Air Bags .....................................128
Transporting Pets ...............................146
Air Bag Light ........................... 88 , 125, 148
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter)
.......................................246
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................... 247
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ....................... 247
Air Conditioner System ...................... 52 , 247
Air Conditioning Filter ....................... 58 , 247
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .................. 57
Air Filter ..............................................246
Air Pressure
Tires ............................................... 266
Alarm
Arm The System ............................ 22 , 23
Panic ................................................13
Rearm The System ............................... 23
Security Alarm ............................... 22 , 91
Alarm System
Security Alarm ..................................... 22
All Wheel Drive
Towing
............................................235
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................. 257
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ................................................ 9
Android Auto ........................................ 316
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 253 , 284
Disposal .......................................... 254
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 98
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............................ 93
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 317
Arming System
Security Alarm
.................................... 22
Assist, Hill Start .................................... 103
Audio Systems (Radio) ............................ 288
Auto Down Power Windows ........................ 59
Auto Up Power Windows ........................... 59
Automatic Door Locks .............................. 27
Automatic Headlights ............................... 44
Automatic High Beams ............................. 43
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......... 57
Automatic Transmission ......................... 158
Adding Fluid ..................... 257 , 285, 287
Fluid And Filter Change ....................... 257
Fluid Change .................................... 257
Fluid Level Check ...................... 256 , 257
Fluid Type ........................ 256 , 285, 287
Special Additives ............................... 257
Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Mode ........................................... 27 , 162
Autostick
Operation
........................................ 163
AUX Cord ............................................. 307
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........ 75
11
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 323
324
AWD
Towing
.............................................235
Axle Fluid .....................................285 , 287
Axle Lubrication .............................285 , 287
B
Back-Up
...............................................193
Battery ..........................................89 , 243
Charging System Light ...........................89
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................14
Location...........................................243
Belts, Seat ...........................................148
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) ............74
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) ............74
Body Mechanism Lubrication ....................249
B-Pillar Location ....................................262
Brake Assist System .................................99
Brake Control System ...............................99
Brake Fluid........................... 255 , 285, 287
Brake System ...............................255 , 279
Fluid Check ....................... 255 , 285, 287
Master Cylinder .................................255
Parking ............................................155
Warning Light ..............................88 , 279
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................157
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ....154
Brightness, Interior Lights ..........................48
Bulb Replacement .................................212
Bulbs, Light ..................................149 , 212
C
Camera, Rear ....................................... 193
Capacities, Fluid .................................... 284
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
............................... 241 , 245
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................. 254
Car Washes.......................................... 276
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 147 , 283
Cargo
Vehicle Loading
................................. 196
Cargo Area Cover ..................................... 65
Cargo Compartment ................................. 65
Cellular Phone ...................................... 308
Certification Label ................................. 196
Chains, Tire .......................................... 273
Changing A Flat Tire ............................... 258
Chart, Tire Sizing ................................... 259
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) .................................................... 97
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............. 147
Checks, Safety ...................................... 147
Child Restraint ...................................... 134
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ................................... 137
Child Seat Installation ......................... 144
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 142
Infant And Child Restraints ................... 136
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 139
Older Children And Child Restraints ........ 136
Seating Positions ............................... 138
Child Safety Locks ................................... 28
Clean Air Gasoline ................................. 281
Cleaning
Wheels............................................ 272
Climate Control ....................................... 52
Automatic .......................................... 52
Coin Holder............................................ 72
Cold Weather Operation .......................... 153
Compact Spare Tire ............................... 270
Console
Floor
................................................. 72
Contract, Service ................................... 320
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ......... 254
Cooling System ..................................... 252
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 253
Coolant Capacity ............................... 284
Coolant Level ............................ 252 , 254
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................... 254
Drain, Flush, And Refill ........................ 252
Inspection ........................................ 254
Points To Remember .......................... 255
Pressure Cap .................................... 254
Radiator Cap .................................... 254
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
................... 253 , 284, 285
Corrosion Protection .............................. 275
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......... 166 , 168
Cruise Light ..................................... 94 , 95
Cupholders ............................................ 73
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 324
325
Customer Assistance ..............................319
Cybersecurity ........................................289
D
Daytime Running Lights
............................43
Dealer Service ......................................244
Deck Lid
Power Release ....................................64
Defroster, Windshield .............................148
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ........................49
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................96
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...........................................43
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
.......................................243
Disable Vehicle Towing ............................234
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................254
Disturb ................................................316
Door Ajar ...............................................89
Door Ajar Light ........................................89
Door Locks
Automatic ...........................................27
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ...28
Doors....................................................23
Drag And Drop Menu ..............................288
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............................28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
..............................205
E
Electric Brake Control System ..................... 99
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................... 98
Electronic Roll Mitigation ............. 100, 105
Electric Remote Mirrors ............................ 40
Electronic Power Distribution
Center (Fuses) ...................................... 216
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .... 166
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............... 100
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ....... 89
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................. 233
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................... 207
Jacking .................................... 224 , 258
Jump Starting ........................... 228 , 229
Towing ............................................234
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 97
Engine ........................................ 241 , 242
Air Cleaner ....................................... 246
Block Heater ..................................... 154
Break-In Recommendations ................. 154
Checking Oil Level ..............................243
Compartment ............................ 241 , 242
Compartment Identification .................. 241
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................... 252 , 285
Cooling ............................................ 252
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 147 , 283
Fails To Start .................................... 153
Flooded, Starting ............................... 153
Fuel Requirements ............................ 281
Jump Starting ........................... 228 , 229
Oil.................................. 245 , 284, 285
Oil Filler Cap ............................. 241 , 245
Oil Filter .......................................... 246
Oil Selection ............................. 245 , 284
Oil Synthetic ..................................... 246
Overheating ..................................... 231
Starting ................................... 150 , 151
Engine Oil Viscosity ................................ 245
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ........................ 245
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature....................................... 132 , 235
Ethanol ............................................... 282
Exhaust Gas Cautions .................... 147 , 283
Exhaust System ............................ 147 , 251
Exterior Lighting ...................................... 43
Exterior Lights ................................ 43 , 149
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
....................................... 246
Air Conditioning ........................... 58 , 247
Engine Oil ................................ 246 , 285
Engine Oil Disposal ............................ 246
Flashers.............................................. 207
Hazard Warning ................................ 207
Turn Signals ......................... 46 , 95, 149
11
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 325
326
Flash-To-Pass
.........................................44
Flooded Engine Starting ..........................153
Floor Console ..........................................72
Fluid Capacities .....................................284
Fluid Leaks ..........................................149
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ..............................................255
Cooling System ..................................252
Engine Oil .........................................243
Transfer Case ....................................257
Fluid, Brake ..................................285 , 287
Fluids And Lubricants .............................285
Fog Lights ..............................................46
Fold-Flat Seats ........................................28
Folding Rear Seats ...................................29
Forward Collision Warning ........................109
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .........................207
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...........................233
Fuel....................................................281
Additives ..........................................281
Clean Air ..........................................281
Ethanol ............................................282
Gasoline ..........................................281
Gauge ...............................................93
Materials Added .................................281
Methanol .........................................282
Octane Rating ...........................281 , 285
Requirements ...................................281
Specifications ................................... 285
Tank Capacity ................................... 284
Fuses ................................................. 216
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ................. 67
Gasoline, Clean Air ................................. 281
Gasoline, Reformulated .......................... 281
Gauges
Fuel .................................................. 93
Gear Ranges ........................................ 159
Glass Cleaning ...................................... 278
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................. 197 , 198
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............ 197, 198
GVWR ................................................. 197
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.............................. 205
Hazard Warning Flashers ........................ 207
Head Restraints ................................ 36 , 37
Head Rests ...................................... 36 , 37
Headlights ........................................... 214
Automatic .......................................... 44
Cleaning .......................................... 276
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 43
Lights On Reminder .............................. 45
On With Wipers ................................... 45
Passing ............................................. 44
Switch............................................... 43
Time Delay ......................................... 45
Washers .......................................... 243
Heated Mirrors ....................................... 42
Heater, Engine Block .............................. 154
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch .................................................. 43
Hill Start Assist ..................................... 103
Hitches
Trailer Towing ................................... 200
Holder, Coin ........................................... 72
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ................ 67
Hood Prop ............................................. 63
Hood Release ......................................... 63
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 326
327
I
Ignition ..................................................16
Switch ...............................................16
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide
...............................10
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................39 , 207
Instrument Cluster .............................78 , 80
Descriptions........................................95
Display ........................................81 , 83
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................278
Interior Appearance Care .........................277
Interior Lights .........................................46
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............49
Introduction ..............................................8
J
Jack Location
........................................224
Jack Operation ..............................225 , 258
Jacking Instructions ................................225
Jump Starting ...............................228 , 229
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
...................................22
Panic Alarm ........................................13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ......15, 21
Unlatch The Trunk ................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote
Keyless Entry)
.........................................14
Key Fob Programming (Remote
Keyless Entry) ......................................... 15
Key-In Reminder ...................................... 17
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................... 24 , 151
Enter The Trunk ................................... 13
Passive Entry ...................................... 24
Passive Entry Programming .................... 24
Keys ..................................................... 11
Replacement ................................ 15 , 21
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
................... 46
Lane Change Assist .................................. 46
LaneSense...........................................189
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................119
Latches ............................................... 149
Hood................................................. 63
Lead Free Gasoline ................................ 281
Leaks, Fluid .........................................149
Life Of Tires .......................................... 268
Light Bulbs................................... 149 , 212
Lights ................................................. 149
Air Bag .............................. 88 , 125, 148
Automatic Headlights ............................ 44
Brake Assist Warning .......................... 102
Brake Warning ............................ 88 , 279
Bulb Replacement ............................. 212
Cruise ......................................... 94 , 95
Daytime Running ................................. 43
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..................... 43
Engine Temperature Warning ................. 89
Exterior ........................................... 149
Fog .................................................. 46
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................... 207
Headlight Switch ................................. 43
Headlights ........................... 43 , 45, 214
Headlights On With Wipers ..................... 45
High Beam ......................................... 43
High Beam/Low Beam Select ................. 43
Instrument Cluster ............................... 43
Intensity Control .................................. 48
Interior .............................................. 46
License ........................................... 215
Lights On Reminder .............................. 45
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 91
Map ................................................. 47
Park ........................................... 44 , 95
Passing ............................................. 44
Reading ............................................ 47
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 90
Security Alarm .................................... 91
Service............................................ 212
Traction Control ................................. 102
11
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 327
328
Turn Signals
.................... 43 , 46, 95, 149
Vanity Mirror .......................................42
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ..............................89 , 95
Load Leveling System ...............................67
Load Shed Battery Saver On .......................86
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............86
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............86
Loading Vehicle .............................196 , 197
Capacities ........................................197
Tires ...............................................262
Locks
Auto Unlock
........................................27
Automatic Door ....................................27
Child Protection ...................................28
Power Door .........................................24
Low Tire Pressure System ........................112
Lubrication, Body ...................................249
Lug Nuts ..............................................280
M
Maintenance Free Battery
........................243
Maintenance Schedule ...................236 , 237
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
..................................91 , 97
Manual
Park Release
.....................................231
Service ............................................322
Media Hub ...........................................307
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................28
Memory Seat .......................................... 28
Memory Seats And Radio .......................... 28
Methanol ............................................. 282
Mirrors .................................................. 39
Electric Powered ..................................40
Electric Remote ................................... 40
Heated .............................................. 42
Outside ............................................. 40
Rearview.................................... 39 , 207
Vanity................................................42
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ................................................ 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .................. 112
Mopar Parts .........................................321
MP3 Control ......................................... 307
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................... 43
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................... 154
O
Occupant Restraints
............................... 117
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......... 281, 285
Oil Change Indicator ................................. 82
Reset ................................................82
Oil Filter, Change ................................... 246
Oil Filter, Selection ................................. 246
Oil Pressure Light .................................... 90
Oil, Engine ................................... 245 , 285
Capacity .......................................... 284
Change Interval ................................. 245
Checking ......................................... 243
Dipstick ........................................... 243
Disposal .......................................... 246
Filter....................................... 246 , 285
Filter Disposal ................................... 246
Identification Logo ............................. 245
Materials Added To ............................ 246
Pressure Warning Light ......................... 90
Recommendation ...................... 245 , 284
Synthetic ......................................... 246
Viscosity .................................. 245 , 284
Onboard Diagnostic System ....................... 96
Operating Precautions .............................. 96
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
............................ 8 , 322
Outside Rearview Mirrors .......................... 40
Overheating, Engine ............................... 231
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ............... 8
P
Paddle Shift Mode
................................. 163
Paddle Shifters ..................................... 163
Paint Care ........................................... 275
Panic Alarm ........................................... 13
Parking Brake ...................................... 155
ParkSense System, Rear ......................... 182
Passive Entry ......................................... 24
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 328
329
Personalized Main Menu .........................288
Pets....................................................146
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........262
Power
Brakes
.............................................279
Deck Lid Release .................................64
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...................220
Door Locks .........................................24
Mirrors ..............................................40
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............75
Seats ................................................30
Steering ...........................................165
Sunroof..............................................60
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............38
Windows ............................................59
Power Seats
Forward .............................................30
Lumbar ..............................................31
Rearward ...........................................30
Recline ..............................................30
Power Steering Fluid ...............................285
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............123
Preparation For Jacking ...........................225
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
........................................123
R
Radial Ply Tires
......................................267
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........254
Radio Operation ....................................308
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................... 50
Rear Axle (Differential) ............................ 258
Rear Camera ........................................ 193
Rear Cross Path .................................... 108
Rear ParkSense System .......................... 182
Rear Seats, Folding .................................. 29
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Towing
............................................235
Recreational Towing ............................... 204
Reformulated Gasoline ........................... 281
Refrigerant .......................................... 247
Release, Hood ........................................ 63
Reminder, Lights On ................................. 45
Reminder, Seat Belt ............................... 118
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
....................................22
Panic Alarm ........................................ 13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...... 15, 21
Unlatch The Trunk ................................13
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
......................... 19
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
........................................ 20
Uconnect Settings ................................ 20
Remote Trunk Release ............................. 64
Replacement Bulbs ................................212
Replacement Keys ............................. 15 , 21
Replacement Tires ................................. 268
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 321
Restraints, Child .................................... 134
Restraints, Head ............................... 36 , 37
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................... 233
Rotation, Tires ...................................... 273
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................... 148
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................. 149
Safety Defects, Reporting ........................ 321
Safety Information, Tire .......................... 258
Safety Tips .......................................... 147
Safety, Exhaust Gas ............................... 147
Schedule, Maintenance .................. 236 , 237
Seat Belt Reminder ................................. 90
Seat Belts ................................... 118 , 148
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................... 122
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .... 122
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .................................... 122
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ......... 123
Child Restraints ................................. 134
Energy Management Feature ............... 123
Extender.......................................... 122
Front Seat ........................ 118 , 119, 120
Inspection ........................................ 148
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................ 120
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ............... 121
Lap/Shoulder Belts ............................ 119
Operating Instructions ........................ 120
Pregnant Women ............................... 123
Pretensioners ................................... 123
11
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 329
330
Rear Seat
.........................................119
Reminder .........................................118
Seat Belt Extender ..............................122
Seat Belt Pretensioner .........................123
Untwisting Procedure ..........................121
Seat Belts Maintenance ..........................277
Seats ........................................ 28 , 30, 34
Adjustment ...................................28 , 30
Easy Entry ..........................................33
Head Restraints .............................36 , 37
Heated ..............................................34
Height Adjustment ................................30
Power ................................................30
Rear Folding .................................28 , 29
Seatback Release ................................29
Tilting .......................................... 28 , 30
Vented...............................................35
Ventilated...........................................35
Security Alarm ...................................22 , 91
Arm The System ...................................22
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............285
Sentry Key
Key Programming
.................................21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ............................20
Sentry Key Replacement .....................15 , 21
Service Assistance .................................319
Service Contract ....................................320
Service Manuals ....................................322
Shifting ...............................................156
Automatic Transmission ...............156, 158
Shoulder Belts ...................................... 119
Side View Mirror Adjustment ...................... 40
Signals, Turn ............................ 46 , 95, 149
Siri ..................................................... 315
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert
............................ 314
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................... 273
Snow Tires ........................................... 270
Spare Tires .......................... 224 , 270, 271
Spark Plugs .......................................... 285
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .................................. 285
Oil .................................................. 285
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
.............................. 166 , 167
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ........................ 172
Cancel............................................. 168
Resume ........................................... 167
Set ................................................. 166
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......... 166, 168
Sport Mode .......................................... 164
Starting ....................................... 150 , 151
Automatic Transmission ...................... 150
Button ............................................... 16
Cold Weather .................................... 153
Engine Fails To Start ........................... 153
Starting And Operating .................... 150 , 151
Starting Procedures ....................... 150 , 151
Steering ................................................ 38
Column Lock ...................................... 38
Power ............................................. 165
Tilt Column......................................... 38
Wheel, Heated .................................... 39
Wheel, Tilt .......................................... 38
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................. 307
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls .............................................. 307
Storage............................................... 275
Storage, Vehicle .............................. 58 , 275
Storing Your Vehicle ............................... 275
Stuck, Freeing ...................................... 233
Sun Roof ............................................... 60
Sunglasses Storage ................................. 77
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ... 126
Synthetic Engine Oil ............................... 246
T
Telescoping Steering Column
..................... 38
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .......... 57
Tilt Steering Column ................................ 38
Time Delay
Headlight
........................................... 45
Tire And Loading Information Placard ......... 262
Tire Markings ....................................... 258
Tire Safety Information ........................... 258
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 330
331
Tires ........................... 149 , 265, 270, 274
Aging (Life Of Tires) .............................268
Air Pressure ......................................265
Chains .............................................273
Changing.................. 224 , 225, 228, 258
Compact Spare ..................................270
Flat Changing ....................................228
General Information ....................265 , 270
High Speed .......................................266
Inflation Pressure ...............................266
Jacking ....................................225 , 258
Life Of Tires ......................................268
Load Capacity ...................................262
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
.........................92 , 112
Quality Grading ..................................274
Radial..............................................267
Replacement ............................228 , 268
Rotation ...........................................273
Safety......................................258 , 265
Sizes ...............................................259
Snow Tires ........................................270
Spare Tires ....................... 224 , 270, 271
Spinning ..........................................267
Trailer Towing ....................................202
Tread Wear Indicators .........................268
Wheel Mounting .................................228
Wheel Nut Torque ..............................280
To Open Hood .........................................63
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................201
Towing ................................................198
Behind A Motorhome .......................... 204
Disabled Vehicle ................................ 234
Guide ..............................................200
Recreational .....................................204
Weight ............................................200
Towing Behind A Motorhome .................... 204
Traction ..............................................205
Traction Control .................................... 105
Trailer Towing ....................................... 198
Cooling System Tips ........................... 204
Hitches............................................ 200
Minimum Requirements ...................... 201
Tips ................................................203
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................... 201
Wiring ............................................. 203
Trailer Towing Guide ............................... 200
Trailer Weight .......................................200
Transfer Case
Fluid
............................... 257 , 285, 287
Maintenance .................................... 258
Transmission ........................................ 158
Automatic ................................ 158 , 256
Fluid ....................................... 285 , 287
Maintenance .................................... 256
Shifting............................................ 156
Transporting Pets .................................. 146
Tread Wear Indicators ............................ 268
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ................................. 64
Trunk Release Remote Control ................... 64
Turn Signals ..................................... 46 , 95
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings
.............12, 13, 20, 290
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display ............................................... 290
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features
.......................... 20 , 24, 290
Passive Entry Programming .................... 24
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................... 274
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ... 67
Universal Transmitter ............................... 67
Unleaded Gasoline ................................ 281
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................ 121
USB ................................................... 307
V
Vanity Mirrors
......................................... 42
Vehicle Certification Label ....................... 196
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 279
Vehicle Loading .................... 196 , 197, 262
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................. 9
Vehicle Security Alarm .............................. 22
Vehicle Storage .............................. 58 , 275
11
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 331
332
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help
....................................10
Navigation ..........................................10
Operating Instructions ...........................10
Searching User Guide ............................10
Viscosity, Engine Oil ................................245
Voice Command ....................................309
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................309
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard
........................207
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
..........................................92
Warnings And Cautions ...............................9
Warranty Information ..............................321
Washer
Adding Fluid
......................................243
Washers, Windshield ........................50 , 243
Washing Vehicle ....................................276
Water
Driving Through ................................. 205
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................... 272
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................... 272
Wind Buffeting .................................. 60 , 62
Window Fogging ...................................... 58
Windows ............................................... 59
Power ............................................... 59
Reset Auto-Up ..................................... 60
Windshield Defroster .............................. 148
Windshield Washers ........................... 49 , 50
Fluid ............................................... 243
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................... 249
Windshield Wipers ................................... 49
Wipers Blade Replacement ...................... 249
Wipers, Intermittent ................................. 49
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .............................. 50
20_LX_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 332
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab
, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
CHRYSLER
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under
license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
_LX_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
300
OWNER’S MANUAL
owners.mopar.ca
U. S. Canada
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
mopar.com/om
